Challenger
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Challenger
Fourth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
16D491-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE .................................101
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................223
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................377
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................489
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................527
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................607
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................629
10
INDEX .....................................................................641
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
ment.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............12
▫ KeyFob ............................13
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........14
▫ General Information ....................16
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................16
▫ Replacement Key Fobs ..................17
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming ...........18
▫ General Information ....................18
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ..............19
▫ Rearming Of The System .................19
▫ To Arm The System ....................19
▫ To Disarm The System ..................20
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........21
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................21
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ................22
▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................23
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................23
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ...................24
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................24
2
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs .........25
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement .............25
▫ General Information ....................26
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................27
▫ Remote Start Abort Message...............28
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............28
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ..............................29
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ..............................29
▫ Cancel Remote Start ....................30
▫ General Information ....................30
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................31
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................31
▫ Power Door Locks .....................32
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY ....34
▫ General Information ....................39
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................39
▫ Power Windows .......................39
▫ AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped ........40
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .............41
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING................42
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ................43
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........43
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............43
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................45
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........56
▫ Child Restraints .......................71
▫ Transporting Pets ......................92
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....92
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................95
▫ Transporting Passengers..................95
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................95
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................96
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ..........................98
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
includes a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE:
In case the ignition does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the engine START/
STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the
OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Remote Keyless Entry key fob, a
Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to pre-
vent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key
fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to
start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow
the engine to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine
off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the
engine.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the ve-
hicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once an key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle key fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the fol-
lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approxi-
mately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after
5 seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to 8
times.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless igni-
tion system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition
system is OFF, and the key is physically removed
from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK
button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
• Push the LOCK
button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the LOCK
button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry” in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle⬙ for further information).
• Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob
buttons for all key fobs.
Key Fob
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illumi-
nated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK
button on the key fob. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked
with the key fob. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK
button on the key fob to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on
or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the TRUNK button on the key fob two times within
five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the
button on the key fob for at least one second
and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the
turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the
button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by
the system.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal, if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the key
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in
step #2 for removal.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Separating Key Fob Case
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while
still maintaining security. The system has a
range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and horn will chirp twice (if pro-
grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be activated
by pushing the keyless ignition button twice (or the
ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position)
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START
button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-
minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or
unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the keyless ignition button.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Ignition feature, the message “Remote start
active - Push start button” will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID) until you push the START
button.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to
Power Door Lock Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the
key fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing
the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open
with the ignition either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine
not running), a chime will sound as a reminder.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming —
If Equipped
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock both doors automatically. The interior
door panel lock knob will raise when the door is un-
locked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature which will function if the ignition is in the OFF
position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does
not find any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, the
car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle,
and no valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any
of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid, push the button located on the center of the light
bar which is located on the deck lid above the license
plate.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid,
the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another
one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
push the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
NOTE:
• The Ignition Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled
when either front door is opened. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down fea-
ture. Push the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pushing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 MPH (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pushing the
Trunk Release button on the key
fob twice within five seconds or
by using the external release
switch located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release
feature will function only when
the vehicle is in the unlock
condition.
Trunk Release
Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-
bol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more
information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry
feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed
in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF posi-
tion. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to “Warning and Indicator Lights” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-
vertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Small Children Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child re-
straint.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached us-
ing a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center only may be removed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
Tether Strap Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchor-
agesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable (ALR) Seat
Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes Center Only may be removed
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L or 5.7L use the
following engine break-in recommendations:
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
the break in period. Add oil as required.
For vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the following
engine break-in recommendations:
Despite modern technology and World Class manufac-
turing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following
driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
• Push the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Push the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st
to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera-
tor pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi
(2414 km).
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-
cupant Restraints” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................107
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .107
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................114
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........114
▫ Power Mirrors .......................115
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............115
▫ Vanity Mirrors........................116
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............116
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor ..............................116
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED............................117
▫ Rear Cross Path — If Equipped............123
▫ Modes Of Operation ...................125
▫ General Information....................126
䡵 SEATS ..............................126
▫ Power Seats .........................127
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........129
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......131
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . .131
3
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline ...........132
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry ...............133
▫ Head Restraints ......................133
▫ Folding Rear Seat .....................136
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........138
䡵 LIGHTS .............................140
▫ Headlight Switch .....................140
▫ Automatic Headlights ..................141
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............141
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped ...........................141
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................143
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped .........................143
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................144
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............144
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................145
▫ Turn Signals .........................146
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................146
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................146
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................146
▫ Map/Reading Lights ...................147
▫ Interior Lights .......................148
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......150
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............150
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Mist Feature .........................151
▫ Windshield Washers ...................151
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............152
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........152
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN ............................154
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED ...............155
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................156
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................157
▫ To Activate ..........................158
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................158
▫ To Deactivate ........................159
▫ To Resume Speed .....................159
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............159
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............160
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED .........................161
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .163
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .164
▫ To Activate/Deactivate..................165
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............166
▫ To Cancel ...........................167
▫ ToTurnOff..........................167
▫ To Resume ..........................167
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............168
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......170
▫ Overtake Aid ........................174
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......174
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ........175
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......177
▫ General Information....................182
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode ..............................182
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................186
▫
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation . .186
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............187
▫ Changing FCW Status ..................188
▫ Service FCW Warning ..................189
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................189
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................189
▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............190
▫ ParkSense Display .....................190
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........194
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................195
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........196
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........196
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................198
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................200
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ...............201
▫ Sunglasses Storage ....................201
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .201
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .202
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............203
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........205
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......206
▫ Using HomeLink .....................208
▫ Security ............................208
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................208
▫ General Information....................209
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........210
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............211
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........211
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............211
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........211
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................212
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............212
▫ Sunshade Operation....................212
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................212
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................213
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................213
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........213
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................217
▫ Front Cupholders .....................217
▫ Rear Cupholders .....................218
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-
main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-
tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.
Rear Detection Zones
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft ( 3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
BSM Warning Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
RCP Detection Zones
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
used to control the position of the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup-
port. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Easy Entry Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from
the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can
go then push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes while pushing the adjust-
ment button and release button. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
(Continued)
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3 — Seat Belt Loop
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING! (Continued)
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or por-
table DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Folding Rear Seatback Loop Folded Rear Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is
located under the center front edge of the hood.
3. Push the safety catch to the left.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
(Continued)
Hood Safety Catch Location
Hood Safety Catch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Headlight Switch
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
ing the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
engine is shut Off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
lens. Push the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob is pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward, past the second detent.
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. The Battery Protection also includes the glove
compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior
light operation after automatic battery protection is en-
abled (Lights OFF), either place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
NOTE: For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto
wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the
headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is
ON, and the front wipers complete a minimum of 5 wipe
cycles within 60 seconds.
In this case (auto wipes) the headlights will turn off if no
wipes occurs in 240 Seconds.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
120 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET-/Decel
2 — SET+/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruis-
ing at a constant preset speed. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
NOTE: The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops
below 15 mph (24 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
5 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — SET+/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET-/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID.
NOTE:
•
When you override and push the SET + button or SET -
buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph
(24 km/h) when following a target vehicle.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indica-
tor” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati-
cally to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Brake Alert
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavail-
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC func-
tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Offset Driving Condition Example
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings
(within the DID), to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
FCW Message
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the “On”
setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are
farther away. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79
inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
ing the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
59-47 in
(150-120
cm)
47-39 in
(120-100
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Arc — Left
Rear
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arc — Cen-
ter Rear
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arc —
Right Rear
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING ALERTS
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
ParkSense Switch
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the ParkSense system is disabled, the
Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi-
mately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Informa-
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be
OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch
is pushed and the system is disabled or requires service,
the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and
then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
Information Display (DID) will display the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the
system temporarily unavailable.
• When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instru-
ment cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it
is sounding an audio tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the Driver Information
Display (DID).
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate. The image will be displayed in the touch-
screen display along with a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink) button and a power sunroof switch may also
be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy/reading lights.
Push the lens to turn on the light. Push it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob is pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located on the left side of the
first button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally and stop when the full open position is reached.
This is called “Express Open.” During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
Sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
Sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at full
closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the front windows closed, open the front windows to-
gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” can be powered when
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit.
NOTE:
• The front integrated center stack power outlet can be
changed from switched “ignition” to constant “bat-
tery” powered all the time by moving the integrated
center stack fuse #12 in the Rear Power Distribution
Center from fuse location “IGN” to “B+.” Refer to
“Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
• To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR cigar knob and
element must be used.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
NOTE: All accessories connected to these powered out-
lets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is
not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
Power Outlet — Center Console
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console
and in the door panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the cupholder,
they can spill when the door is closed, burning the
occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid
injury.
Front Cupholders
Door Cupholder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el-
bows.
Rear Cupholders
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12
Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed
to hold various size coins). The center console may also
be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
Glove Compartment
Opened Glove Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone
devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Push this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
Center Console
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........226
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........227
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ......230
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......232
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............233
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............245
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............255
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............257
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............258
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....259
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset ..................261
▫ Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) –
If Equipped .........................263
▫ Cruise Control........................264
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items ..............264
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped .........................276
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................278
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................280
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................282
4
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............282
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Settings ..................282
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Settings ...................296
䡵 PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .....312
▫ Home ..............................313
▫ Timers .............................314
▫ Gauges 1 ...........................317
▫ Gauges 2 ...........................318
▫ G-Force.............................320
▫ Engine .............................321
䡵 PERFORMANCE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .322
▫ Launch Mode ........................323
▫ Drive Mode Set-Up ....................328
▫ Default Mode ........................330
▫ Sport Mode..........................331
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ......336
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .336
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................337
▫ Radio Operation ......................338
▫ Media Mode .........................339
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .339
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information .........339
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................341
▫ General Overview .....................341
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Climate Control Functions ...............347
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......349
▫ Operating Tips .......................350
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ..............354
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ................................355
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................355
▫ Get Started ..........................356
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................357
▫ Radio ..............................358
▫ Media..............................360
▫ Phone..............................361
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................363
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................364
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................365
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ............366
▫ Vehicle Health Alert ...................367
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................367
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............368
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............370
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) .....................371
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN).........373
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .............373
▫ Do Not Disturb ......................374
▫ General Information....................374
▫ Additional Information .................375
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlets 5 — Keyless Start/Stop Button
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Glove Compartment 7 — Headlight Switch
4 — Media Center
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L or 5.7L
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-
ther information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-
ther information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The
light should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4
minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the en-
gine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ig-
nition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on when there is a fault in the Forward Collision Warning system.
Contact your authorized dealership.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an inter-
active display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The
DID Menu Items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
Driver Information Display (DID) Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UP And DOWN Arrow Buttons:
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button al-
lows you to cycle through the submenu items
of the Main menu item.
DID Controls
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT arrow but-
ton will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous
scrolling.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be dis-
played.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the UP
and DOWN
arrows will allow the user to select the item of
interest.
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
• Pushing the LEFT
arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perfor-
mance Timers):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following
procedure(s):
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
popup message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off
with ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for 5 seconds),
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within
the DID display when the driver configured gear shift
point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.
This indication notifies the driver to change gear corre-
sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is
advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated
until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information on en-
abling, disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift
Indicator.
Cruise Control
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Cruise Ready
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate
that the Cruise Control system is activated.
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in
the DID.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID.
Push and release the OK button to toggle units (km/h
or mph) of the digital speedometer
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu is displayed in the DID.
Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to enter
the submenu items of Vehicle Info. Follow the direc-
tional prompts to access or reset any of the following
Vehicle Info submenu items:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Performance Features — If Equipped
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Push an release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Performance menu is displayed in the DID.
Push the RIGHT
arrow button to enter the
submenus.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
• Current G-Forces
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 5 laps with the best lap highlighted
in green.
• Top Speed
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h)
within 10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0
MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 MPH
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 MPH
(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for
two seconds.
0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h)
within 15 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0
MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 100
MPH (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 15 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to 100
MPH (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK
button for two seconds.
Reaction Timer
Press the OK button to engage Countdown Timer. The
time it takes for the wheel speed to not equal 0 MPH,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
after the word GO, is your reaction time. If wheel speed
is greater than 0 MPH before ’GO’, the reaction time will
be a negative time.
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, 1/8 Mile, and 1/4 Mile
timers will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH
(0 km/h).
1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-
tions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run,
push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
1/4 Mile (400 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (400 meters).
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-
tions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
mile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile (400 meters) run,
push and hold the OK button for two seconds.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was
pushed.
• This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 MPH (48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop.
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the
current and last run values.
Current G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of
the forces.
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
values.
Lap Timer
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
• Pushing the OK button will start “current” timer from
0:00.0.
• When the OK button is pushed, the times are updated
accordingly.
• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the
“current” timer will stop and the time will be reset to
0:00.00.
• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “cur-
rent” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button for a Lap
that current time populates, the Last time and also
populates the 1st (top) space on the Timer History
page the current time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of
the OK button.
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away
from this page.
Lap History
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
will color highlight the time that is the best time from the
Timer Page.
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from
the Timer Page.
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are
on.
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Top Speed
When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
last reset:
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here
unless/until the driver resets the screen.
• Latching over ignition cycles.
• Units will change with the global change in units.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Two submenu pages one with Current value (instanta-
neous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and one
without the Current Value displayed (toggle the LEFT
or RIGHT arrow button to select one):
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Range To Empty (miles or km)
• Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Toggle the LEFT
or RIGHT arrow button to
select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will
display the following:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 or km/l) of Trip A or Trip B
since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This feature shows the audio information.
Stored Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages, if any. Pushing the RIGHT
or LEFT arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the stored
messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
• Standard (default)
• Detailed
7. Defaults
• Ok
• Cancel
Diagnostics — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to view engine and emis-
sion vehicle faults.
• Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent.
• There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is
requested during which the following message is
displayed:
• “Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.”
• Driver must push the OK button again to see the next
Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed.
• Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up
or down).
• Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest.
• If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached
- when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted
from the beginning.
• When no codes are present or the last code is reached
= (P0000) and this message is displayed:
• “No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the
driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected
by load reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, tow-
ing, frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-
tems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-
tices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate and then press
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety/
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Per-
sonal Data and System Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, select the preferred setting option. Once the set-
ting is complete, either press the Back Arrow/Done
button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the
faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
on the touchscreen and select from “English,” “Français,”
or “Español.”
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To
change the Mode status, press and release the “On” or
“Off” button on the touchscreen.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change mode status, press and
release the “Brief” or “Long” button on the touchscreen.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the mode status, press and
release the “Always,” “With Help,” or “Never” button on
the touchscreen.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Set Time and Format
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.”
• Show Time Status
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press
the corresponding arrows above and below the current
date to adjust.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance
Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you
to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport”
button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount
of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering
effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to
provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering
effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to
provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
• ParkSense
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” button.
Refer to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating infor-
mation.
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol-
ume” button on the touchscreen, then select from “Low,”
“Med,” or “High.” ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When
Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Moni-
tor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on.
When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert
status, press the “Off,” “Lights,” or “Lights & Chime”
button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. To enable or disable, press
the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” but-
ton on the touchscreen, and select “On” or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the ve-
hicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “RE-
VERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Assistance” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay”
button on the touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To enable or disable, press the “Rain
Sensing” button on the touchscreen, and select “On” or
“Off.”
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To enable or disable, press the
“Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, and select
“On” or “Off.”
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on when the
doors are unlocked with the key fob. To change the
Illuminated Approach status, press the “Illuminated Ap-
proach” button on the touchscreen and choose either “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” buttons on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button
and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, and select from “On”
or “Off.” Refer to ”Automatic High Beam — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, and select from “On” or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the sound
horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lights w/Lock” button on the touch-
screen, and select from “On” or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Lock” Button and choose “Off,” “1st
Press” or “2nd Press.”
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Remote Door Unlock
This feature will allow you to program your remote door
locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with
the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry
door handle. To make your selection, press the “Remote
Door Unlock” button on the touchscreen and choose
from “All” or “Driver.”
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the key fob will have
to be pushed two times in order to unlock all doors.
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the
outside door handle is grabbed. To make your selection,
press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen and
select from “On” or “Off.” Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the sound
horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lights w/Lock” button on the touch-
screen, and select from “On” or “Off.”
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.”
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on
the touchscreen and select from “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “Engine Off
Power Delay” button and select from “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” buttons on the
touchscreen.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
• Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once properly set, the compass will automatically com-
pensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
• Compass Calibration
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch-
screen when the compass has been successfully cali-
brated.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Compass Variance Zone Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “+” and “–.”
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones and Audio Sources
This feature shows which phones or and audio devices are
paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further informa-
tion, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement .
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This feature shows the call information in the Instrument
Cluster Display. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement .
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable
channels while scanning. To make your selection, press
the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the
channels you would like to skip.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button and select from “Yes” or “No.”
If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select
“Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
all personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and select from “Yes” or “No.” If “Yes” is selected
a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel”
to exit.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear
Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is com-
plete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
When in this display, you may select one of the display
mode settings. To change Mode status, press and release
the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Set Theme
When in this display, you may select the theme for the
display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set
Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired
theme option button until a check-mark appears showing
that the setting has been selected.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the desired
language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a touchscreen button (button on the touch-
screen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the “Control Screen
Time-Out” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a pro-
grammed route. To make your selection, press the “Navi-
gation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle”.
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer-
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable”
button on the touchscreen.
• ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will
provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the
proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or
“Sound and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-
tem function and operating information.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the DID or Uconnect System. The chime
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touch-
screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the key fob. To change the Illuminated
Approach status, press the “+” or “-” button on the
touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
ing that the setting has been selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob,
or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may
be selected with or without the “Sound Horn on Lock”
feature selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash
Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Key Fob,
or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may
be selected with or without the “Sound Horn on Lock”
feature selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated with the RKE. To make your
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Key Fob UNLOCK button. You must press
the Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the pas-
senger’s doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first
press of the Key Fob UNLOCK button.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the
handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door
is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use Key Fob).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Key Fob LOCK or
UNLOCK buttons. To make your selection, press the
“Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
⬙Personal data cleared”.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators, as received from the
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
with the capabilities of your vehicle in real-time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen then press the “Performance
Pages” button on the touchscreen. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen to access that specific Perfor-
mance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• G-Force
• Engine
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home
When Home is selected, the following options will be
available:
•
A series of six images which can be selected by the user.
Performance Pages — Home
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll
through vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the Performance Control feature.
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected, you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
Performance Pages — Timers
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10 will overwrite the last saved run
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save
feature is listed below:
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save to the jump drive.
• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
runs to the SD Card.
Performance Pages — Save
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket”.
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated a drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID).
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛ and ¼ Mile timers
will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile
(200 meters).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) MPH
Displays the vehicle speed at the time ⅛ Mile was
reached.
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) MPH
Displays the speed the vehicle was at when ¼ Mile was
reached.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Brake Speed
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
brake pedal is pressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis-
play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
MPH (48 km/h).
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 1
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Gauges 2
Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (Automatic
Transmission)
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (Manual Transmission)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
they are cleared by the driver.
Performance Pages — G-Force
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Speed
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
Performance Pages — Engine
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
PERFORMANCE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Performance Control
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of
driving behavior desired. The Performance Control fea-
ture is controlled through the Uconnect radio and may be
accessed by performing any of the following:
• Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instru-
ment panel switch bank.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from the “Apps”
menu.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from within the Per-
formance Pages menu.
You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
functionality of the Launch Control and Drive Mode
Set-Up features within Performance Control.
Descriptions of these features are provided below. To
access information about the functionality of these fea-
tures through the Uconnect system, press the “Info”
button on the touchscreen.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Launch Mode
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Mode system that
is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Mode is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
Launch Mode
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
• Launch Mode is not available for the first 500 miles of
the vehicle’s life.
• Launch Mode should only be used when the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
• Launch Mode is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, select
“Performance Control”, and press the “Launch Mode”
button on the touchscreen or push the Super Track Pak
button on the integrated center stack switch bank.
2. If desired, press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on
the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust
your launch RPM for optimum launch/traction. To
adjust the Launch RPM, press and drag the slider bar,
or press the arrows on the touchscreen, to adjust the
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
holding RPM. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen when finished. The setting will be saved.
NOTE: The default RPM for launch mode is a preset
factory value. Optimal launch RPM will depend on the
engine and tires on the vehicle, as well as the road and
weather conditions. Not all RPM settings will be usable
in all configurations and scenarios. If requested launch
RPM is not attainable in a given scenario, the engine will
provide the maximum amount of torque possible to get
as close as possible to the requested RPM.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the
touchscreen.
4. Ensure the vehicle is not moving and the steering
wheel is pointing straight.
5. Hold the brake pedal and verify the vehicle is in a
forward transmission gear.
6. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will
hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM
Set-up” screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information
Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
7. When conditions four through six have been met, the
DID will read “Launch Ready Release Brake.” Release
the brake and continue to hold wide open throttle to
launch.
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch Control will
be active until the vehicle reaches 62 MPH (100 km/h).
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
display “Launch Aborted” in the DID for any the follow-
ing conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
to another mode if Launch Control is enabled.
NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500
miles of engine break-in.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, select
Performance Control, and press the “Launch Control”
button on the touchscreen or push the Super Track Pak
button on the center stack switch bank.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touch-
screen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
launch RPM for optimum launch/traction. To adjust
the Launch RPM, press and drag the slider bar or press
the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding
RPM. Press the back arrow button when finished. The
setting will be saved.
NOTE: The default for launch control is 3000 RPM.
Optimal launch RPM will depend on the engine and tires
on the vehicle, as well as road and weather conditions.
Not all RPM settings will be usable in all configurations
and scenarios. If requested launch RPM is not attainable
in a given scenario, the engine will provide the maximum
amount of torque possible to get as close as possible to
the requested RPM.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the
touchscreen.
4. Ensure the vehicle is not moving and the steering
wheel is pointing straight.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Fully depress the clutch pedal and verify the vehicle is
in first gear.
6. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the
accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine
speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch
RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information
Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
7. When conditions four through six have been met, the
DID will read “Launch Ready Release Clutch.” Re-
lease the clutch quickly and continue to hold wide
open throttle to launch. Execute shifts as described in
the section “Manual Transmission – Shifting.”
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch control will
be active until the vehicle reaches 62 MPH (100 km/h).
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
display “Launch Aborted” in the DID for any the follow-
ing conditions:
• The brake is applied during launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the ESC
system to another mode if Launch Control is enabled.
NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500
miles of engine break-in.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Drive Mode Set-Up
Pressing the “Drive Mode Set-Up” button on the touch-
screen within the Performance Control screen indicates
the real-time status of the various systems. Pressing the
“Sport Mode Set-Up” or “Default Mode Set-Up” buttons
on the touchscreen, the driver can configure their indi-
vidual drive modes and see how those configurations
affect the performance of the vehicle.
NOTE: Not all of the options listed in this manual are
available on every vehicle, below is a chart with all
available Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Drive Mode Set-Up
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Available Mode Configurations
Transmission Engine Engine/Trans Steering Paddle Shifters Traction Control
Auto N/A X X X X
Manual X N/A X N/A X
Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed
operation.
NOTE: These settings will remain in effect when using
the Launch Control feature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Default Mode
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode
is for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode,
the Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in
their Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steer-
ing assist may be configured to Normal, Sport, or Com-
fort by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touch-
screen. The Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled
while in this mode.
Default Mode
Default Mode Set-Up
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical enthusi-
ast driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to
their Sport settings. The steering wheel paddle switches
are enabled. The Traction Control defaults to Normal.
Any of these four settings may be changed to the driver’s
preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank to put the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these
settings. The customized settings will only be active
when the Sport button is active.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode Set-Up
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Possible Drive Mode configurations are listed below with
accompanying descriptions. The information contained
in the list below can also be accessed from within the
mode Set-Up menus. To access the information, press the
“Info” button on the touchscreen from the mode Set-Up
menu, and use the left/right arrows to toggle through
available descriptions. The title for each system in the
Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the descrip-
tions for each function of that system.
Engine
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response for an enhanced driving experience.
Engine
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Normal
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for standard
throttle response for normal driving.
Engine/Trans
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience.
Engine/Trans
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Normal
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for a balance
of throttle response, shift comfort and economy for
normal driving.
Paddle Shifters — If Equipped With Automatic
Transmission
• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
• OFF
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
Paddle Shifters – Automatic Transmission
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Traction
• SPORT
Press the “SPORT” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• NORMAL
Press the “NORM” button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
Traction Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Steering
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide an
increased amount of steering feel, requiring a higher
amount of steering effort.
• Normal
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balanced steering feel and steering effort. This is also
your vehicles pre-set steering setting.
• Comfort
Press the “Comf” button on the touchscreen to provide a
lower steering effort.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Steering
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Located in the front storage area of the center console,
this feature allows an iPod/MP3 player, or an external
USB device, to be connected to the audio system.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
USB/AUX/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX
etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth, SD Card).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.), the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect 8.4 Radio Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect
8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4
Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0 Radio Only)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
perature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the Uconnect customer-
programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Set-
tings” in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Assist Button
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-
where.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
SiriusXM Travel Link
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-
hones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................382
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........382
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....383
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...........383
▫ Normal Starting.......................384
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) .............................387
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................387
▫ After Starting ........................388
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .388
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .389
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission ...........389
▫ Shifting.............................390
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............392
▫ 1–4 Skip Shift ........................393
▫ Downshifting ........................394
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............394
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............396
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .396
5
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped ...........................396
䡵 AUTOSTICK ..........................404
▫ Operation ..........................404
䡵 SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL ...........................406
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........407
▫ Acceleration .........................407
▫ Traction ............................407
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............408
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................408
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................408
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING .............410
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED...................411
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................411
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........412
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped......413
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................414
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .415
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .415
▫ Brake System Warning Light..............415
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............416
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............418
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............418
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................419
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............422
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........422
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........427
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB)...............428
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS)................428
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............429
▫ Tire Markings ........................429
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........433
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........434
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........436
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........441
▫ Tire Pressure ........................441
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................442
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .444
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................444
▫ Tire Types ...........................445
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............447
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............447
▫ Tire Spinning ........................451
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................451
▫ Life Of Tire .........................452
▫ Replacement Tires .....................452
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......454
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....455
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .456
▫ Premium System ......................459
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
▫ General Information....................463
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................463
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped...............463
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . .464
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) .....465
▫ 6.4L Engine ..........................465
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................466
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............466
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......467
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................467
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................468
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................468
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............469
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................470
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............470
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............472
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................472
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............472
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......473
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........473
▫ Overloading .........................473
▫ Loading ............................474
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................474
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............475
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............478
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) ............................479
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............480
▫ Towing Requirements ..................481
▫ Towing Tips .........................486
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................487
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .487
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run, and will
automatically disengage itself when the engine is run-
ning. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, cycle the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go
Key Fob is in the passenger compart-
ment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Automatic Transmission Only
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Manual Transmission Only
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the
vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the
button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, release the button.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3.
If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three
short pushes in a row and vehicle speed must be above
5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position
until the vehicle is stopped, placed PARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector
is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the Driver Information Display (DID) will
display a “VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
Only
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the gear selector in first gear or REVERSE and
then apply the parking brake.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
position.
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
the engine is not running.
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row before the
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is
stopped, placed in park and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and
RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position,
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the clutch pedal, press the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then push and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15
seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the gear selector while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchro-
nizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
Manual Shifter
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the gear selector near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the gear selector toward third
and fourth gear. Make sure you move the gear selector
into second or fifth gear. If you let the gear selector move
in the direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from
first to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
Shift Pattern
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recom-
mended shift speed chart.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
Axle Ratio 1-4 4-5 5-6
3.90 mph 20 37 48
(km/h) (32) (59) (77)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position
for Keyless Enter-N-Go), as compared to the ignition
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
This is normal operation of the transmission reverse
inhibitor system.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis-
sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or transmis-
sion.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less.
After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can
press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Downshifting
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
CAUTION!
• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or the manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply
(Continued)
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the auto-
matic transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the trans-
mission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the gear selector and in the Driver Information
Display (DID).
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the lever rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift po-
sitions. Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick
shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information). Toggling the gear selector forward
(-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Automatic Transmission Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the
gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position of an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK (automatic transmission).
Check by trying to move the transmission gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the automatic transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an
automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn
the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and
remove the ignition key. Always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, an automatic transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must start the engine and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depend-
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of transmission
shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information). Tog-
gling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually
select the transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a high-
lighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the gear selector
is in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gear selector
forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering
wheel, if equipped) to downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the
(+) shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the gear selector is in
DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tap-
ping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster,
but the ⬙M⬙ will not be highlighted. The transmission will
revert back to normal operation (if the gear selector
remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on
accelerator pedal activity.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver
(using the gear selector, or the shift paddles [if
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
equipped]), unless an engine lugging or overspeed con-
dition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in
DRIVE), the transmission will automatically shift up
when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accel-
erator is fully depressed, the transmission will down-
shift when possible (based on current vehicle speed
and gear, except 6.2L and 6.4L models). Lack of accel-
erator pedal activity will cause the transmission to
revert to automatic operation.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be
maintained until the gear selector is returned to
DRIVE, or as described below. The transmission will
not upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor
will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or
holding the gear selector in the (-) position, will
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible
at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle
(if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE)
until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission (when equipped with
automatic transmission), and steering systems are all set
to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide im-
proved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deacti-
vated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument
panel switch bank.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “SUPER
TRACK PAK” button, refer to “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-
proved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Pro-
grammable Features” or “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
– SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indi-
cates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
service. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless
Enter-N-Go), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position of an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Re-
move the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle. When the keyless ignition is in the “OFF”
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the automatic trans-
mission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. There will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning
Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor-
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi-
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applica-
tions) this is considered normal conditions.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
NOTE:
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a mo-
mentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul-
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to
return to ESC On.
• ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (if equipped) are ESC
partial off mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6)
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
(Continued)
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, P235/55R18 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the Drivers Information Display (DID)
will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values shown in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure infla-
tion value. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the DID will return the pressure values
shown to their original color, and the “TPM Telltale
Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
display the low pressure values in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide ex-
cellent fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit
over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission)
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide sat-
isfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high quality un-
leaded gasoline having a posted
octane number range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission)
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Pre-
mium” gasoline having a posted oc-
tane number of 91 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this
engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
6.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Pre-
mium” gasoline having a posted oc-
tane number of 91 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this
engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Cap
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
WARNING! (Continued)
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground All Models
Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
On Trailer All OK
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for tow-
ing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........491
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............491
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........492
▫ Description .........................492
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................493
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .493
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........494
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ........497
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................503
▫ Torque Specifications ...................503
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........504
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........505
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................507
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire .............508
▫ Road Tire Installation ..................513
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........514
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............514
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................516
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............518
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bot-
tom side of the Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
Torque Patterns
504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack Fastener
506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or 1st gear (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
Jack Warning Label
Jack Engagement Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Jacking Location
510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting And Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper lug nut torque.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and
cycle the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Remote Battery Posts Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,
push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with
automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE / 1ST GEAR and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
Console Storage Bin
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Locking Tab
Tether Strap
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission
out of PARK for towing.
Manual Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, then the only accept-
able method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........530
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L ..........531
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
(392 HEMI) ...........................532
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .533
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................533
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap ..................534
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................535
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................536
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................536
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........537
▫ Engine Oil ..........................538
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................544
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................544
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............545
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............547
▫ Body Lubrication .....................550
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............551
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................551
7
▫ Exhaust System ......................552
▫ Cooling System ......................554
▫ Brake System ........................560
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual
Transmission (If Equipped) ...............562
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......562
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....563
▫ Rear Axle ...........................565
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................565
䡵 FUSES ..............................573
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .....574
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .....579
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................588
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................589
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................591
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped ...............591
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped. . .592
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp ............593
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp ...............593
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp ...............593
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .593
▫ License Lamp ........................593
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................594
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Fluid Capacities — 3.6L .................594
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Automatic
Transmission ........................595
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Manual
Transmission ........................596
▫ Fluid Capacities — 6.4L .................597
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................598
▫ Important Information .................598
▫ Engine — 3.6L .......................599
▫ Chassis — 3.6L .......................600
▫ Engine — 5.7L .......................601
▫ Chassis — 5.7L Automatic Transmission .....602
▫ Chassis — 5.7L Manual Transmission .......603
▫ Engine — 6.4L .......................604
▫ Chassis — 6.4L Automatic Transmission .....605
▫ Chassis — 6.4L Manual Transmission .......606
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI)
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the Trip Odometer button to
turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L and 6.4L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
“SAFE” range on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil — 3.6L and 5.7L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Change Engine Oil — 6.4L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L and 5.7L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection — 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 6.4L Engine
Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR
oil meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use
in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Shaker Hood — If Equipped
Shaker Hood Oil Filler
For vehicles equipped with a “Shaker Hood”, the upper
scoop will need to be removed so that oil can be properly
added to the engine.
To do this you, will need follow the procedure below:
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
glove compartment.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
NOTE: Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside for
the shaker assembly.
3. Locate the oil fill cover in base assembly to expose the
oil fill cap.
4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil.
5. Re-install shaker assembly.
Shaker Hood Air filter Cleaning
1. Remove the air filter from the intake and set the filter
clamp a side.
2. Measure the length of the filter media.
3. Fill a bucket with warm clean water to the depth
matching the filter media measurement and add a
mild household detergent or air filter cleaning solu-
tion.
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Without allowing the solution to flow back into the
inside of the air filter, submerge the filter media in to
the water and let it soak for ten minutes.
5. Empty the bucket filled with dirty water and repeat
steps 3 and 4.
6. Refill the bucket with clean warm water and rinse the
filter by rotating the filter.
NOTE: The water should be clean with no signs of dirt in
the bucket.
7. Allow the filter to air dry. Re-install the filter on the
intake system once it is dry.
Shaker Hood Removal And Cleaning
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
glove compartment.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
NOTE: Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside for
the shaker assembly.
3. Using a water and mild detergent clean the following
locations.
— The water drain slot located at the front forward edge
of the shaker assembly.
— The seals attached to the scoop and air box.
— Lower water drains located in the lower shaker
assembly and air box as well as the hood interface areas
for the seals. Apply Mopar Leather, Rubber & Vinyl
Protectant after cleaning to seals.
4. Re-install shaker assembly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
Battery Location
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-
fine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low
GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manu-
facturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Access Door
Filter Access Cover
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
A/C Air Filter
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicles exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or place the ignition in
the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless
Enter-N-Go). The fan is temperature controlled and
can start at any time the ignition switch is in the
ON position (RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-
Go).
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
(If Equipped)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4
inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,
if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immedi-
ately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Rear Axle
Fluid Level Check
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will
improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm below the fill
plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed
on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Super-
charged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If
Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Super-
charged) – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Electronic Stability Control
6 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Stability Control
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
8 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Security – If Equipped / Under Hood
Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2 – (Non 6.2L Super-
charged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If
Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Super-
charged)
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue –
Police
– Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
22 40 Amp Green /
20 Amp Blue –
Police
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Super-
charged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
(Challenger/Charger Police) / Elec-
tronic Shift Module (Challenger)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays
(Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering
Module (Charger/300) / Fuel Pump
Relay (Charger/300) / 5–Speed
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police)/AC
Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay /
Fuel Pump Relay (Challenger) / Rad
Fan Relays (Challenger)
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module (Charger/300) / Front
Axle Disconnect (Charger/300) / Adap-
tive Cruise (Challenger) – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise (Charger/300) – If
Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and de-
scriptions are printed on the inside of the power distri-
bution center cover.
Opening The Access Cover
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Rear Power Distribution Center
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp –
Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control
Module
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control
Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
12 – 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP –
If Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 – – Fuse – Spare
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface –
Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump
22 – 20 Amp Yellow – Police Right Spot Lamp – Police
23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
26 – 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission
Module (Charger/300)/
Electronic Shift Module
(Charger/300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If
Equipped
32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
33 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering Col-
umn Lock (300) – If
Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column
Module/Clock (300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve
– If Equipped
37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
40 – – Fuse – Spare
41 – – Fuse – Spare
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
43 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Seat And Steer-
ing Wheel Module
(Heated Steering
Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
44 – 10 Amp Red
Park Assist / Blind Spot /
Rear View Camera
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
45 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mir-
ror / Compass (Charger/
300) / Humidity Sensor
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting
/ Auto High BEAM /
Day Time Running
Lamps – If Equipped
48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – If
Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
52 – 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Ve-
hicle Temperature Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Po-
lice
60 – 5 Amp Tan Heated Washer Nozzles
(Charger)
61 – – Fuse – Spare
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/
300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
67 – 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor /
Sunroof / Inside RR
View Mirror / Power
Outlet Illumination (Cen-
ter Console) / Police Run
Acc Relay
68 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Power Outlet –
R/A Sense (Charger/300)
Rear Sunshade (Charger/
300)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID) D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
Halogen Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge
tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
To replace the passenger side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp cover.
3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
NOTE: The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this
point.
4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to
remove.
5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and
disconnect.
6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
To replace the driver side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three
fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and
then rotate cover off to the side.
NOTE: The cover has an electrical connector that does
not need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to
the side.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove
and access the rear of the headlamp assembly.
4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
5. Remove the headlamp cover.
6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to
remove.
7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and discon-
nect.
8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are
not serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop
Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are
not serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized
dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Automatic Transmission
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Automatic Transmission: 87 Octane or 89 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Manual Transmission
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Manual Transmission: 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Capacities — 6.4L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
15 Quarts 14.4 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 3.6L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 En-
gine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Chassis — 3.6L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
8-Speed Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 5.7L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 En-
gine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – With Automatic Transmission 89 Octane recommended – 87 Octane acceptable,
0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – With Manual Transmission 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Chassis — 5.7L Automatic Transmission
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
8-Speed Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Rear Axle – With Automatic Trans-
mission
We recommend you use MOPAR OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis — 5.7L Manual Transmission
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Rear Axle – With Manual Trans-
mission
We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Engine — 6.4L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under
all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer
only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil
Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633
for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis — 6.4L Automatic Transmission
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
8-Speed Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Chassis — 6.4L Manual Transmission
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 3.6L
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
608 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance chart for the required mainte-
nance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires.
Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 609
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 5.7L
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
610 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 611
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance chart for the required mainte-
nance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires.
Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart — 3.6L And 5.7L
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals and replace if
necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. X X X X X X X
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid (If Equipped).
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
XXX X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 613
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Adjust park brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
XXX X X X X
Replace spark plugs. (*) X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped) if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
Most of your driving is at sus-
tained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C),
driving in dusty conditions, or
stop and go driving.
XX X
Change the rear axle fluid if us-
ing your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-
road, or frequent trailer towing.
XX X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 615
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
(*) The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
616 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.4L
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 617
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
618 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart — 6.4L
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change
the engine
oil and en-
gine oil
filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 619
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Rotate the
tires, rotate
at the first
sign of ir-
regular
wear, even
if it occurs
before
scheduled
mainte-
nance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
620 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect
front sus-
pension, tie
rod ends,
and boot
seals, for
cracks or
leaks and
all parts for
damage,
wear, im-
proper
looseness
or end
play; re-
place if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 621
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
If using
your ve-
hicle for
any of the
following:
dusty or
off-road
conditions.
Inspect the
engine air
cleaner
filter; re-
place if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect the
brake lin-
ings; re-
place if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the
CV joints.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the
exhaust
system.
XXXXXXXX XXX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Adjust the
parking
brake on
vehicles
equipped
with four
wheel disc
brakes.
XXXXX
Inspect the
manual
transmis-
sion fluid
(If
Equipped).
XXXXXXXX
Inspect the
rear axle
fluid.
XXXXXXXX
624 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change
the manual
transmis-
sion fluid (if
equipped).
XXX
Change
the rear
axle fluid if
using your
vehicle for
any of the
following:
police, taxi,
fleet or fre-
quent
trailer
towing.
XXX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 625
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Replace
the engine
air cleaner
filter.
XXXXX
Replace
the air con-
ditioning
filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect
and re-
place the
PCV Valve
if neces-
sary
X
626 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or
Months:
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilome-
ters:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Replace
the spark
plugs –
6.4L En-
gine **
X
Flush and
replace the
engine cool-
ant at 120
months if not
done at
150,000
miles
(240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 627
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
628 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................631
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............631
▫ Prepare A List ........................631
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............631
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............631
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............632
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........632
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................633
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........633
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................633
▫ Service Contract ......................634
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............635
䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................635
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............635
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................635
▫ In Canada...........................636
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............636
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
(Continued)
634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 639
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .....................411,414
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .161
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............556
Adding Fuel .............................470
Adding Washer Fluid ......................551
Additives, Fuel ...........................468
Adjust
Down ...............................128
Forward ..........................127, 131
Rearward .........................127, 131
Up .................................128
AirBag...............................56, 57
Advance Front Air Bag .................57, 58
Air Bag Operation .......................59
Air Bag Warning Light ....................67
Enhanced Accident Response ................67
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................70
FrontAirBag ........................56, 57
If A Deployment Occurs ...................65
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................60
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............69
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............69
Side Air Bags ...........................60
Transporting Pets ........................92
Air Bag Deployment ........................56
Air Bag Light .......................67, 97, 234
Air Bag Maintenance .......................69
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .544
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................547
Air Conditioning Filter ..................352, 548
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........350, 353
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............547, 548
Air Conditioning System.................349, 547
Air Pressure, Tires.........................442
Alarm
Arm The System ........................19
Disarm The System .......................20
Alarm, Panic .............................24
642 INDEX
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................19, 237
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).....556, 594, 595, 596, 597
Disposal ..............................558
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................416
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................252
Appearance Care .........................565
Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............19
Assist, Hill Start ..........................419
Auto Down Power Windows ..................40
Automatic Door Locks ......................33
Automatic Headlights ......................141
Automatic High Beams .....................141
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......341, 349
Automatic Transmission ..............396, 563, 565
Adding Fluid ......565, 598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Autostick .............................404
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................565
Fluid Change ..........................565
Fluid Level Check .......................564
Fluid Type ............598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Special Additives .......................564
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .......402
Autostick ...............................404
Operation .............................404
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................33
Axle Fluid ..............598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Axle Lubrication .........598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Battery .............................239, 545
Charging System Light ...................239
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ...............25
Location ..............................545
Belts, Seat ...............................96
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................550
B-Pillar Location ..........................436
Brake Assist System .......................418
10
INDEX 643
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............415
Brake Fluid .............598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Brake, Parking ...........................411
Brakes .................................414
Brake System .........................414, 560
Fluid Check .......561, 598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Master Cylinder ........................561
Parking ..............................411
Warning Light ......................235, 414
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................396
Braking ................................269
Braking Distance..........................269
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .........92
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................148
Bulb Replacement......................589, 591
Bulbs, Light...........................99, 589
Camera, Rear ............................198
Capacities, Fluid ................594, 595, 596, 597
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................470
Oil (Engine) ...........................541
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................558
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................95, 469
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ....................472
Car Washes .............................566
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............593
Certification Label.........................472
Chains, Tire .............................454
Changing A Flat Tire .......................504
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................430
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .535
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............95
Checks, Safety ............................95
Child Restraint ............................71
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................76
Center Seat LATCH ......................84
644 INDEX
Child Restraints .........................71
Child Seat Installation .....................89
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........85
Infants And Child Restraints ................74
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....84
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt ..................................86
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......78
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........74
Seating Positions ........................77
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............90
Clean Air Gasoline ........................466
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................567
Climate Control ..........................341
Automatic ............................341
Cold Weather Operation ....................387
Compact Spare Tire ........................448
Console, Overhead ........................200
Contract, Service ..........................634
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........558
Cooling System...........................554
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............556
Coolant Capacity .............594, 595, 596, 597
Coolant Level ......................555, 559
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................558
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................555
Inspection ............................559
Points To Remember .....................559
Pressure Cap ..........................558
Radiator Cap ..........................558
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .556, 594, 595, 596,
597, 598, 599, 601, 604
Corrosion Protection .......................565
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................161
Cruise Light..........................257, 258
Cupholders ..........................217, 573
Customer Assistance .......................631
10
INDEX 645
Customer Programmable Features ..........280, 282
Data Recorder, Event .......................70
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............149
Daytime Running Lights ....................143
Dealer Service............................536
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................43
Deck Lid, Power Release .....................41
Defroster, Rear Window.....................220
Defroster, Windshield .......................97
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................150
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................533
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................146
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................538
Disabled Vehicle Towing..............523, 524, 525
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................558
Door Ajar...............................243
Door Ajar Light ..........................243
Door Locks
Door Locks ..........................23, 31
KeyFob...............................31
Remote ...............................31
Remote Keyless Entry .....................31
Door Locks, Automatic ......................33
Door Opener, Garage.......................201
Driver Information Display
DID .............................261, 264
Instrument Cluster Display .............261, 264
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................408
Electrical Power Outlets.....................213
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................115
Electronic Brake Control System ...............415
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................416
646 INDEX
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................427
Traction Control System ...................422
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ......574
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)
. .157, 158, 161
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............422
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........241
Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................43
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................518
Jacking ...............................504
Jump Starting ......................514, 516
Overheating ...........................491
Towing ........................523, 524, 525
Emergency Trunk Release ....................43
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........535
Engine..............................531, 532
Air Cleaner ...........................544
Block Heater ..........................388
Break-In Recommendations .................92
Checking Oil Level ......................538
Compartment ...................530, 531, 532
Compartment Identification ................530
Coolant (Antifreeze) ........555, 598, 599, 601, 604
Cooling ..............................554
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................95, 469
Fails To Start ..........................387
Flooded, Starting .......................387
Fuel Requirements ......................463
Jump Starting ......................514, 516
Oil .......538, 594, 595, 596, 597, 598, 599, 601, 604
Oil Change Interval ......................539
Oil Filler Cap ..........................541
Oil Filter .............................544
Oil Selection ..............539, 594, 595, 596, 597
Oil Synthetic ..........................544
Overheating ...........................491
Starting ..............................382
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................540, 541
10
INDEX 647
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................540
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............67
Entry System, Illuminated ....................21
Ethanol ................................466
Event Data Recorder ........................70
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................95, 469
Exhaust System ........................95, 552
Exterior Folding Mirrors ....................114
Exterior Lighting..........................140
Exterior Lights ............................99
Filler Location Fuel ........................470
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................544
Air Conditioning ....................352, 548
Engine Oil ...............544, 598, 599, 601, 604
Engine Oil Disposal .....................544
Flashers ................................491
Hazard Warning ........................491
Turn Signal ......................99, 146, 256
Flash-To-Pass ............................146
Flooded Engine Starting ....................387
Fluid, Brake.............598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Fluid Capacities ................594, 595, 596, 597
Fluid Leaks ..............................99
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................564
Brake ................................561
Cooling System .........................555
Engine Oil ............................538
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........598
Fog Lights ..............................144
Folding Rear Seat .........................136
Forward Collision Warning ..................186
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................518
Fuel...................................463
Adding ..............................470
Additives .............................468
648 INDEX
Clean Air .............................466
Ethanol ..............................466
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................470
Gasoline ..............................463
Light ................................253
Materials Added ........................468
Methanol .............................466
Octane Rating ............463, 598, 599, 601, 604
Requirements ..........................463
Specifications ................598, 599, 601, 604
Tank Capacity ................594, 595, 596, 597
Fueling ................................470
Fuses ..................................573
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........201, 208
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................470, 534
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................466
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................463
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................466
Gear Ranges .............................398
G-Force ................................269
Glass Cleaning ...........................571
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................473, 475
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............473, 475
GVWR .................................473
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................408
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................491
Headlights ..............................592
Automatic ............................141
Cleaning .............................571
Delay ................................143
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........146
Lights On Reminder .....................144
On With Wipers .....................141, 152
Passing ..............................146
10
INDEX 649
Switch ...............................140
Time Delay ............................143
Washers ..............................551
Headlight Washers ........................551
Head Restraints .......................133, 134
Head Rests ..........................133, 134
Heated Mirrors ...........................115
Heater, Engine Block .......................388
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .146
Hill Start Assist...........................419
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................478
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............201
Hood Release ............................138
Ignition
Key..................................12
Illuminated Entry ..........................21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................16
Information Center, Vehicle ..................259
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................107
Instrument Cluster ...........227, 230, 238, 240, 256
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............226
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............572
Interior Appearance Care....................570
Interior Lights ...........................148
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............150
Introduction ..............................4
iPod Control.............................336
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................336
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ................336
Jacking Instructions........................508
Jack Location ............................505
Jack Operation ........................504, 508
Jump Starting.........................514, 516
KeyFob.................................13
650 INDEX
Arm The Alarm .........................19
Lock The Doors .........................23
Panic Alarm ............................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........18, 25
Remote Keyless Entry .....................22
Unlatch The Trunk .......................24
Unlock The Doors .......................23
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ....25
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) .....25
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry ................22
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
Keyless Enter-N-Go .....................34, 383
Enter The Trunk .........................24
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ............23, 290, 306
Passive Entry Programming ............290, 306
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ..............23
Unlock From The Passenger Side .............23
Keyless Go...............................12
Key, Replacement ..........................17
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................16
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............146
Lane Change Assist........................146
Lap History .............................270
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................47
Lap Timer ..............................269
Latches .................................99
Hood ................................138
Lead Free Gasoline ........................463
Leaks, Fluid ..............................99
Life Of Tires .............................452
Light Bulbs ...........................99, 589
Lights ...............................99, 140
AirBag .........................67, 97, 234
Automatic Headlights ....................141
Brake Assist Warning ....................426
Brake Warning ......................235, 414
10
INDEX 651
Bulb Replacement .......................591
Center Mounted Stop ....................593
Courtesy/Reading ...................147, 201
Cruise ............................257, 258
Daytime Running .......................143
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............145, 146
Engine Temperature Warning ...............238
Exterior ...............................99
Fog .................................144
Headlights .........................140, 592
Headlights On Reminder ..................144
Headlights On With Wipers .............141, 152
Headlight Switch .......................140
High Beam ............................146
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............146
Illuminated Entry ........................21
Instrument Cluster ......................140
Intensity Control ........................148
Interior ...........................148, 201
License ..............................593
Lights On Reminder .....................144
Low Fuel .............................253
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........245
Map Reading .......................147, 201
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........149
Park ................................255
Passing ..............................146
Reading ...........................147, 201
Seat Belt Reminder ......................233
Security Alarm .........................237
Service ...........................589, 591
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........249, 456
Traction Control ........................426
Turn Signal ..................99, 145, 146, 256
Vanity Mirror ..........................116
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .238, 256
Loading
Vehicle .......................472, 474
Capacities ............................474
652 INDEX
Tires ................................436
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode ......................276
Battery Saver On .......................276
Electrical Load Reduction .................276
Intelligent Battery Sensor ..................276
Locks ..................................31
Automatic Door .........................33
Auto Unlock ...........................33
Door .................................31
Power Door ............................32
Low Tire Pressure System ...................456
Lubrication, Body .........................550
Lug Nuts ...............................503
Maintenance Free Battery....................545
Maintenance Procedures ....................537
Maintenance Schedule.........608, 610, 613, 617, 619
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .245, 535
Manual
Backward .........................131, 132
Forward ..........................131, 132
Rearward .............................131
Tilt .................................132
Manual Park Release .......................520
Manual, Service ..........................636
Manual Transmission ................389, 562, 565
Fluid Level Check ...................562, 565
Map/Reading Lights ...................147, 201
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................561
Methanol ...............................466
Mirrors ................................107
Electric Remote .........................115
Exterior Folding ........................114
Heated ...............................115
Outside ...........................114,115
Rearview .............................107
Vanity ...............................116
10
INDEX 653
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................456
MOPAR Parts.........................536, 635
MTBE/ETBE ............................466
Multi-Function Control Lever .................145
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................92
Occupant Restraints ........................43
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . .463, 598, 599, 601, 604
Oil, Engine .............261, 538, 598, 599, 601, 604
Capacity ....................594, 595, 596, 597
Change Interval ........................539
Checking .............................538
Dipstick ..............................538
Disposal ..............................544
Filter ...................544, 598, 599, 601, 604
Filter Disposal .........................544
Identification Logo ......................540
Materials Added To ......................542
Pressure Warning Light ...................240
Recommendation ..........539, 594, 595, 596, 597
Synthetic .............................544
Viscosity .............540, 541, 594, 595, 596, 597
Oil Filter, Change .........................544
Oil Filter, Selection ........................544
Oil Pressure Light .........................240
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................533
Operating Precautions ......................533
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................114
Overhead Console.........................200
Overheating, Engine .......................491
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,636
Paint Care ..............................565
Panic Alarm ..............................24
Parking Brake ............................411
654 INDEX
ParkSense System, Rear .....................189
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry ............................133
Passing Light ............................146
Performance .............................265
Personalized Menu Bar .....................354
Pets....................................92
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........437
Power
Brakes ...............................414
Deck Lid Release ........................41
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................579
Door Locks ............................32
Mirrors ..............................115
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........213
Seats ................................127
Steering ..............................410
Sunroof ..............................210
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............155
Windows ..............................39
Power Seats
Down ...............................128
Forward ..............................127
Power Lumbar .........................128
Rearward .............................127
Tilt .................................128
Up .................................128
Power Steering Fluid ......598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............53
Preparation For Jacking .....................507
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................53
Programmable Electronic Features .............282
Programmable Features..................280, 282
Radial Ply Tires ..........................444
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........558
10
INDEX 655
Radio Frequency
General Information ............16, 18, 26, 30, 39
Radio Operation ..........................339
Radio Remote Controls .....................337
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................336
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................152
Rear Camera ............................198
Rear Cupholder ..........................218
Rear ParkSense System .....................189
Rear Seat, Folding .........................136
Rear Window Defroster .....................220
Rear Window Features .....................220
Recorder, Event Data .......................70
Recreational Towing .......................487
Reformulated Gasoline .....................466
Refrigerant ..............................548
Release, Hood............................138
Reminder, Lights On .......................144
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................45
Remote Control
Starting System .........................27
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm .........................19
Lock The Doors .........................23
Panic Alarm ............................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........18, 25
Remote Keyless Entry .....................22
Unlatch The Trunk .......................24
Unlock The Doors .......................23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........337
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ..........................291, 308
Uconnect Settings ....................291, 308
Remote Starting System......................27
Remote Trunk Release.......................41
Replacement Bulbs ........................589
Replacement Keys .........................17
656 INDEX
Replacement Parts.........................536
Replacement Tires .........................452
Reporting Safety Defects ....................635
Restraint, Head .......................133, 134
Restraints, Child...........................71
Restraints, Occupant ........................43
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................518
Rotation, Tires ...........................455
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................96
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................98
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................635
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................95
Safety Information, Tire .....................429
Safety Tips ...............................95
Schedule, Maintenance............608, 610, 613, 617
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........54
Energy Management Feature ................54
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................49
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............51
Pregnant Women ........................53
Seat Belt Extender .......................52
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................53
Seat Belt Reminder .......................45
Seat Belt System .........................43
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................572
Seat Belt Reminder .........................45
Seat Belts .............................45, 96
Child Restraint ..........................71
Extender ..............................52
Front Seat ........................45, 47, 49
Inspection .............................96
Operating Instructions ....................49
Pregnant Women ........................53
Pretensioners ...........................53
Rear Seat ..............................47
10
INDEX 657
Reminder .............................233
Untwisting Procedure .....................51
Seats ........................126, 127, 129, 133
Adjustment ........................126, 127
Head Restraints .....................133, 134
Heated ...............................129
Height Adjustment ......................127
Power ...............................127
Rear Folding ..........................136
Seatback Release ........................136
Tilting ............................127, 133
Vented ...............................131
Ventilated .............................131
Security Alarm.........................19, 237
Arm The System ........................19
Disarm The System .......................20
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .598, 599, 601, 604
Selection Of Oil ..........................539
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming .......................18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................16
Sentry Key Replacement .....................17
Service Assistance .........................631
Service Contract ..........................634
Service Manuals ..........................636
Shift Indicator Light .......................393
Shifting ................................394
Automatic Transmission ..................394
Shoulder Belts ............................47
Side View Mirror Adjustment .................114
Signals, Turn.......................99, 146, 256
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................454
Snow Tires ..............................446
Spare Tire.....................447, 448, 450, 505
Spark Plugs ...................598, 599, 601, 604
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ...............598, 599, 601, 604
658 INDEX
Oil........................598, 599, 601, 604
Speed ...........................267, 268, 269
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ........................159, 160
Cancel ...............................159
Resume ..............................159
Set..................................158
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........157, 158, 161
Sport Mode .............................406
Starting..............................27, 382
Automatic Transmission ..................383
Cold Weather ..........................387
Engine Fails To Start .....................387
Remote ...............................27
Starting And Operating .....................382
Starting Procedures ........................382
Steering
Column Controls .......................145
Column Lock ..........................154
Power ...............................410
Tilt Column ........................154, 155
Wheel, Heated .........................156
Wheel, Tilt .........................154, 155
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............337
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .337
Storage ................................588
Storage, Vehicle .......................351, 588
Storing Your Vehicle .......................588
Stuck, Freeing............................518
Sunglasses Storage ........................201
Sun Roof ...............................210
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........57
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................544
System, Remote Starting .....................27
Telescoping Steering Column..............154, 155
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........349
10
INDEX 659
Tilt
Down ...............................128
Up .................................128
Tilt Steering Column....................154, 155
Time Delay, Headlight ......................143
Timers ..........................267, 268, 269
Tip Start................................383
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......436, 437
Tire Markings ............................429
Tires......................98, 441, 447, 448, 637
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................452
Air Pressure ...........................441
Chains ...............................454
Changing ......................504, 508, 513
Compact Spare .........................448
Flat Changing ..........................513
General Information ...............441, 447, 448
High Speed ...........................444
Inflation Pressures .......................442
Jacking ........................504, 507, 508
Life Of Tires ...........................452
Load Capacity ......................436, 437
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............456
Pressure Warning Light ...................249
Quality Grading ........................637
Radial ...............................444
Replacement .......................452, 513
Rotation ..............................455
Safety ............................429, 441
Sizes ................................430
Snow Tires ............................446
Spare Tire ...................447, 448, 450, 505
Spinning .............................451
Trailer Towing .........................482
Tread Wear Indicators ....................451
Wheel Mounting ........................513
T
ire Safety Information .....................429
Tire Service Kit . . . .492, 493, 494, 497, 498, 500, 501, 502
660 INDEX
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................480
To Open Hood ...........................138
Top Speed ..............................271
Towing ................................474
Disabled Vehicle .................523, 524, 525
Guide ...............................479
Recreational ...........................487
Weight ...............................479
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........487
Traction ................................407
Traction Control ..........................422
Trailer Towing ...........................474
Cooling System Tips .....................487
Hitches ..............................478
Minimum Requirements ..................481
Tips.................................486
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................480
Wiring ...............................484
Trailer Towing Guide.......................479
Trailer Weight............................479
Transfer Case
Fluid ...............598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Transmission ............................563
Automatic ......................394, 396, 563
Fluid ............563, 598, 600, 602, 603, 605, 606
Manual ..............................389
Shifting ..............................394
Transporting Pets ..........................92
Tread Wear Indicators ......................451
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .....................41, 43
Trunk Release, Emergency ....................43
Trunk Release Remote Control .................41
Turn Signals..........................146, 256
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features ........291, 308
Operation .............................336
Uconnect Settings ...............23,
24, 291, 308
10
INDEX 661
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information ...................375
Do Not Disturb ........................374
Siri Eyes Free ..........................373
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .....................367
Uconnect Settings ..........................23
Customer Programmable Features ........290, 306
Passive Entry Programming ............290, 306
Uconnect Settings ....................290, 306
Uconnect Voice Command ...................355
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................637
Unleaded Gasoline ........................463
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................51
Vanity Mirrors ...........................116
Vehicle Certification Label ...................472
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ....................437, 472, 474
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........19
Vehicle Storage........................351, 588
Viscosity, Engine Oil ....................540, 541
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................355
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................635
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................551
Washers, Windshield ................150, 151, 551
Washing Vehicle ..........................566
Water
Driving Through ........................408
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................567
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................567
Wind Buffeting ...........................212
Window Fogging .........................351
Windows ................................39
662 INDEX
Power ................................39
Windshield Defroster .......................97
Windshield Washers ....................150, 151
Fluid ................................551
Windshield Wiper Blades....................551
Windshield Wipers ........................150
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................551
Wipers, Intermittent .......................150
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................152
10
INDEX 663
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Challenger
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Challenger
Fourth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
16D491-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
